Owner`s manual | Chrysler 300SRT Automobile User Manual

2010
OWNER’ S MANUAL
300
SRT
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
VIN Location
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 23
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 23 䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 49
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Passive Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 32
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 50
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 53
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 60
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 78
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
11
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
NOTE: With Keyless Go, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the ignition switch
position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Keyless Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the RUN position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 — LOCK
3 — RUN
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
4 — START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an then pull the key out with your other hand.
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry/
Keyless Go (PEKG), the Key Fob will also contain a
special receiver that communicates with the vehicle.
Passive Entry/Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used
with Passive Entry/Keyless Go equipped vehicles. NonPassive Entry/Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used
with Non-Passive Entry/Keyless Go vehicles.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove
Emergency Key Removal
box. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
With the Passive Entry/Keyless Go system, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
the ignition or a vehicle equipped with Keyless Go in
the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
15
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
when the ignition Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle.
position.
With Keyless Go, opening the driver’s door when the
vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in ACC or RUN
(engine stopped) will cause the reminder chime to sound.
Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go, always
remember to place the ignition in OFF.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
problems and loss of security protection.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authoReplacement Keys
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
the authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be pulse, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instruperformed at an authorized dealer.
ment cluster will flash.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 Rearming of the System
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
subject to the following conditions:
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• This device must accept any interference that may be rearm itself.
received, including interference that may cause undesTo Arm the System
ired operation.
Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch (and door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Go Start/Stop button) for unauthorized opera- Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
tion. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security closed, or if all doors are closed, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not
illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In
addition, if you open a door during the arming period,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after
closing the door, you must repeat one of the previouslydescribed arming sequences.
To Disarm the System
Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Press the Keyless Go Start/Stop button until the ElecSecurity Alarm.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates that
the vehicle ignition is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to “Starting Proce- • The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informadisarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
tion). Then either press the power door LOCK switch
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the
while the driver or passenger door is open, press the
alarm will sound.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK button or
press the Passive Entry Door Handle LOCK button (refer
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
to “Door Locks” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
further information).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously-described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
19
further information), press the Keyless Go Start/Stop
button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle),
or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch (if the
Start/Stop button is removed) and rotate it to the RUN
position.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will tampering.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or unlock any
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
door.
Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
“Door Locks” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for switch is turned ON from the LOCK position.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob with RKE Transmitter
To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
“Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under “Door Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Locks” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
When this feature is turned on and the vehicle is
equipped with the Passive Entry system, using the Passive Entry system to UNLOCK the vehicle will cause the
parking lights to flash. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(CustomerFlash Lights with Remote Key Lock
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your InThis feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
strument Panel” for further information.
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. When this
feature is turned on and the vehicle is equipped with the To Lock the Doors
Passive Entry system, using the Passive Entry system to Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitLOCK the vehicle will cause the parking lights to flash. ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using the Panic Alarm
“Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under “Door To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
Locks” for further information.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
are locked with the RKE transmitter, or locked using the
Passive Entry door handle lock button. This feature can The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
be turned on or turned off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- (24 km/h) or greater.
strument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
To Unlatch the Trunk
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
Refer to “Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under
“Door Locks” for further information
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the the Key Fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted slot and gently pry open the access door.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Battery Replacement
1— Battery Access Door
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause distance, check for these two conditions:
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
rubbing alcohol.
the battery is a minimum of three years.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
opening and snap into place.
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob Remote Keyless
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine
following conditions:
conveniently from outside the vehicle while
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
still maintaining security. The system has a
range
of
approximately
300 ft (91 m).
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired NOTE:
operation.
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
may reduce this range.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
NOTE: With Keyless Go, the remote start feature will
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the operate with the Start/Stop button installed in the ignition switch.
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
in the Remote Start mode.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
switch to the RUN position.
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the RUN position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With Passive Entry
Use the Passive Entry feature to unlock the vehicle, press
the Start/Stop button one time if the Keyless Go Start/
Stop button is installed in the ignition switch, otherwise,
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn to the
RUN position. Refer to the “Passive Entry System” under
“Door Locks” for more information.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to
drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will display in the
EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. Once inserted, the
message “Turn To On” will display in the EVIC until
you turn the Key Fob to ON.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
message “Push Button/Insert Key” will display in the
EVIC until you push the START button.
27
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Make sure the key is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in
the ACC or RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
(Continued) panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
the locks to operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in
the ignition OFF or ACC position, a chime will sound as
a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder
chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further details.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
Power Door Lock Switch
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, ACC or RUN position and any front 2. The transmission is in gear.
door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
3. All doors are closed.
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob, returning the ignition 4. The throttle is pressed.
mode to the OFF position, or closing the door will allow
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power 2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF
position (do not start engine).
transmitter.
3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors.
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
disabled as follows:
programming.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
5. Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
for the feature to be enabled or disabled.
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- 6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accorfollowing procedure:
dance with local laws.
1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
switch.
power door locks if:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
abled.
following procedure:
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed 1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition.
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF
position (do not start engine).
4. The driver door is opened.
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
doors.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
programming.
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
enabled or disabled as follows:
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “ElecNOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
in accordance with local laws.
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passive Entry System — If Equipped
• If wearing hand gloves, the Passive Entry door handle
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This fearesponse time.
ture allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
unlock buttons.
(1.5 m) of the driver’s side of the vehicle, grab the front
NOTE:
driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door automati• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, refer to cally.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Feaall doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
further information.
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
• If a passive entry door handle has not been used for “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
72 hours the passive entry feature for that handle may Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Undertime out. Also, if it has been raining on a passive entry standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
door handle for 24 hours, that door handle’s passive
entry feature may be deactivated. Pulling the deactivated front door handle will reactivate that door
handle’s passive entry feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger side of the vehicle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically.
33
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks ALL vehicle doors and chirps the horn
three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the
vehicle).
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door To Enter the Trunk
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the left side of
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
located on the deck lid.
Transmitter In Vehicle
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitunlock feature. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
deck lid.
open doors have been closed, the vehicle checks the
passenger compartment for any valid Passive Entry RKE
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock the Vehicle’s Doors
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on
the outside of the handle, with one of the vehicle’s
Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s side, press the driver’s door handle LOCK
button to lock all four doors.
• The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Child Protection Door Lock
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger side, press the
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
passenger’s door handle LOCK button to lock all four
Protection Door Lock system.
doors.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
NOTE:
• After an outside handle lock cycle, the system will not 1. Open the rear door.
allow a passive entry to unlock the same door for two
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)
seconds. However, the RKE unlock function will work
into the child lock control and pull it upward.
during this time period.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
NOTE: For emergency key information, refer to “A NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
Word About Your Keys”.
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)
into the child lock control and pull it downward.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
door windows.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in
the ACC or RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Power Window Switches
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
AUTO-Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
to the first detent and release it when you want the
the first detent and release it when you want the window
window to stop.
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
The power window switches will remain active for up to
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. OpenThe power window switches will remain active for up to ing either front door will cancel this feature. The time for
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customertime for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Elec- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Intronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set- strument Panel” for further information.
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button (setting it in the
DOWN position). To enable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
the UP position).
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
39
Window Lockout Switch
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Reset
Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead,
the AUTO-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the
AUTO-up feature, perform the following procedure after
vehicle power is restored:
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
1. Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
detent to open the window completely and continue to instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
the window is fully open.
button will operate.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds.
41
Refer to “Passive Entry — If Equipped” under “Door
Locks” in this section for more information on trunk
operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Trunk Release
Button
With the ignition switch in the RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
— if equipped
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Trunk Emergency Release
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature can be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems. For more information on
LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
43
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
collision.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
Please pay close attention to the information in this and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system far away from home or on your own street.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
possible.
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
adjust the front seat.
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
47
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
2
Removing Slack from Belt
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
49
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
latch plate.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
the entire belt is extracted.
folded webbing.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Equipped
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina- to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
tion lap/shoulder belt.
locking mode.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
this feature. Children 12 years old and younger should equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
including those in child restraints.
until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s or passenbelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
ger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and
worn snugly and positioned properly.
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReFor front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensionvehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The
ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
BeltAlert威 warning system is not activated when the
deployed airbag, must be replaced immediately.
front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威 warning system may be triggered when an animal or heavy
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly
than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System stowed.
(BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps: seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert威.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
position except RUN or START, buckle the driver’s seat
the seat belt.
belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position, but do
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light
completed the programming.
to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the RUN NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
position.
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as
long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
53
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
Front Airbag Components
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a winregulations for Advanced Airbags.
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
55
NOTE:
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
but they will open during airbag deployment.
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
and Seat Track Position Sensors
authorized dealer immediately.
Advanced Front Airbag Features
Airbag System Components
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
system components:
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
• Airbag Warning Light
sensors.
• Steering Wheel and Column
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Instrument Panel
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
• Knee Impact Bolster
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the airbag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
(Continued)
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
57
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag
occupant protection.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the side curtain airbag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltrisk of harm from a deploying airbag:
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
buckled up in a rear seat.
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
59
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC airbags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —
if equipped, as required, depending on the severity and
type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
required for this vehicle.
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required. initial deceleration.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
61
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating airbag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruSTART or RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position,
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
also record the nature of the malfunction.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away by an authorized dealer.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
63
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Cut off fuel to the engine.
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
until the ignition key is turned off.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
the battery has power, until the ignition key is reFront and Side Impact Sensors
moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
the Keyless Go Start/Stop button.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
• Unlock the doors automatically.
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a Deployment Occurs
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the airbag system.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have depassenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those airbags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
65
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first placed into the RUN position.
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the approximate six to eight-second interval.
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either highspeed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
67
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Vehicle speed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Engine RPM
WARNING!
• Brake switch status
• Pedal position
• And other parameters
configuration
69
depending
on
vehicle
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the There are different sizes and types of restraints for
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
child.
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
slouching can move the belt out of position.
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belttheir back.
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
lap/shoulder belt.
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. CanaChildren Too Large for Booster Seats
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s webChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
cause serious personal injury.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
73
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats so that two seats share a common
lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
75
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward- NOTE:
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
the strap.
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorbehind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
most direct path between the anchor and the child
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
removing slack in the straps according to the child
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
the vehicle.
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Improper installation of a child restraint to the Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”. A locking clip
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or should not be necessary once the automatic locking
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
when installing an infant or child restraint.
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten webInstalling Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
bing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by deBelts
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch- pressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into
ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), the retractor.
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt
buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionto shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
ally and pull it tight if necessary.
release button facing out.
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
77
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
2
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
79
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
81
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Seat Belts
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
inoperable.
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
Airbag Warning Light
ways.
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
83
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Tilt Mirror In Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Power Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . 136
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 144
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
87
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . .
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . 146
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . .
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . .
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions .
▫ Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
. . . . . 152
. . . . . 153
. . . . . 155
. . . . . 155
. . . . . 156
. . . . . 156
. . . . . 157
. . . . . 157
. . . . . 157
. . . . . 158
. . . . . 160
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 168
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
89
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
91
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
lane next to your vehicle.
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
WARNING!
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt Mirror in Reverse
The Tilt Mirror in Reverse feature tilts the outside rearview mirrors downward when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position and the transmission is in REVERSE.
This feature provides the driver with a better view of the
ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when
backing up. The mirrors will move back to their previous
position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
The Tilt Mirror in Reverse feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable FeaPower Mirror Control
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
further information.
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door position.
trim panel, next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
93
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the MEMORY switch on the driver-side
door trim panel to return the power mirrors to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
audio system; the system will automatically mute your the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
microphone for private conversation.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver- The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
supported phones.
standard that enables different electronic devices to conFor Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
websites:
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
• or call 1–877–855–8400
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
(Uconnect™ Phone button) and
buttons
(Voice Command button) that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
95
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™
Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
prompt.
Help Command
• For certain operations, compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
at any prompt if you ask for help.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
button and follow the audible prompts for
the
directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a
button on the radio control head.
press of the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
97
Cancel Command
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifew instances the system will take you back to the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
previous menu.
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
after the initial pairing process.
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referphone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
given a unique phone name.
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
pairing instructions:
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
• Press the
button to begin.
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
of certain radios.
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular
Call by Saying a Name
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
button to begin.
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to • Press the
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Dial by Saying a Number
“Call.⬙
• Press the
button to begin.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previwant to call.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
may appear in the display of certain radios.
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
phonebook entry that you are adding.
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone• Press the
button to begin.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Cellular Phone
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected celluAccess Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
lar phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.
• Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
• To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonePhonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
book.
Name” section.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
Phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
101
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
NOTE:
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
deleted or edited.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
• Press the
button to begin.
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
entry that you wish to edit.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, when the vehicle is not in motion.
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• Press the
button to begin.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
phonebook entry that you are editing.
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
number to a name entry that already exists in the
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
button while the
from the list, press the
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
⬙Delete.⬙
feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
103
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
is deleted.
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
wish to delete.
deleted or edited.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook
language is deleted.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
book entries, if available.
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
button during the playing of the desired name, and
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
say ⬙Call.⬙
• Press the
button to begin.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
deleted.
operations at this point.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the call, press and hold the
button until you hear a
number designation you wish to call.
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
cellular phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
105
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Features
107
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• Press the
button to begin.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency numvoice commands will be in that language.
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
Mexico.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phoneNOTE:
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
specific and usable across all languages.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance
not be applicable with the available cellular service If you need towing assistance:
and area.
• Press the
button to begin.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
button and
some systems. To do this, press the
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the cellular phone directly.
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
WARNING!
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details on the DVD in
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Uconnect™ Phone System to allow use of this vehicle
Towing Assistance references.
feature in emergency situations, when the cellular
phone has network coverage and stays paired to the
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
Uconnect™ Phone System.
button and
some systems. To do this, press the
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
Voice Mail Calling
button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working press the
a
number,
or
sequence
of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
with Automated Systems.⬙
also to be used for navigating through an automated
Working with Automated Systems
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
This method is used in instances where one generally has number on a pager.
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
navigating through an automated telephone system.
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
vices require immediate response selection. In some say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
tones over the phone.
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone • Press the
button to begin.
network configurations. This is normal.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The Uconnect™ Phone will
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
use of this feature.
will be given the choice to change it.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙ you
button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
111
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the • When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
button and
phone being announced, press the
Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two secelectronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
tions for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a
with one electronic device at a time.
paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 Select Another Cellular Phone
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
• Press the
button to begin.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Press the
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the
button at any time while
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
•
•
•
113
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
Press the
button to begin.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
training mode, follow one of the two following proceAt the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the dures:
prompts.
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
You can also press the
button at any time while radio mode):
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you • Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
wish to delete.
the session begins, or,
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Press the
button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice •
Training⬙ command.
•
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked •
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
•
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Command
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number
in North American English, French, and Spanish accombinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some.
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
Phone Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Audio quality is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero).
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Power-Up
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
119
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
121
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
redial
return to main menu
select phone
send
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
return or main menu
select
phone settings or phone
set up
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to command.
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
seconds, the system will present you with a list of listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
button, listen a normal speaking volume.
options, press the Voice Command
for the beep, and say your command.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton while the dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system set to low.
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
change commands. This will become helpful once you commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
start to learn the options.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
Changing the Volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
button.
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
this mode, you may say the following commands:
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Main Menu
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
mands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
125
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
System Setup
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Language German”
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Language Dutch”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Language Italian”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Language English”
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Language French”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
• “Language Spanish”
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Tutorial”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Voice Training”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice SEATS
button first and wait for the beep Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
Command
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
operation of the vehicle.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogWARNING!
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
• DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
and will improve recognition.
using a seat belt properly.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat
up or down, forward or rearward, or to recline the
seatback. The passenger’s seat will move up or down,
forward or rearward.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Reclining Seats
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
Power Seat Recline Switch
129
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Lumbar Support Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
131
3
Adjustable Head Restraints
NOTE: The rear head restraints are not adjustable.
Removing Head Restraint
To install the head restraint, insert the head restraint rods
into each guide, apply pressure down on the headrest
To remove the head restraint, pull upward on the head
until the head restraint reaches the first lock position,
restraint to it’s highest position, push in both buttons at
push the large button in and push down and adjust head
the base of each head restraint rod, and simultaneously
restraint to desired position.
pull up on the head restraint.
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Ensure that the front of the head restraint is
facing toward the front of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Front Heated Seat Switch
Heated Seats
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
This feature heats the front driver, passenger, and second
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
row seats. The controls for each heater are located near
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
the bottom center of the instrument panel.
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If High-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the Low-level after 30 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one, indicating
the change. Operation on the Low-level setting also turns
off automatically after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
133
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Folding Rear Seats
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
135
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a Memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals, power tilt, telescopic steering column and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the unlock button is pressed.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Memory switch is located on the driver’s door trim
panel. The switch contains an S (SET) button to activate
the memory save function. It also contains a rocker
switch labeled with the number (1) and the number (2).
The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch.
Programming the Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals, power tilt
and telescopic steering column, and radio station presets).
2. Press and release the SET button on the Memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1)
within five seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) will display which memory position is
being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
Memory Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals, power tilt, Transmitter to Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
telescopic steering column, and radio station presets).
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
2. Press and release the SET button on the Memory
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2)
within five seconds. The EVIC will display which To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
memory position is being set.
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a Go™).
memory profile.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
3. Press and release the SET button on the Memory
can be enabled or disabled. For details, refer to “Elecswitch, then press and release the side of the rocker
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customerswitch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. ⬙Memory Profile Set” (1
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Inor 2) will display in the EVIC.
strument Panel” for further information.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed
by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
above.
Memory Position Recall
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side
mirror, adjustable pedals, power tilt and telescopic steering column stop moving. A delay of one second will
occur before another recall can be selected.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
Only)
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the vehicle.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
memory position 1.
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door or the for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go™).
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
139
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
Keyless Go™), the driver seat will move about 2.4 in
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
or Easy Entry.
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN
Entry and Easy Exit position.
position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
abled or disabled. For details, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Keyless Go™), the driver seat will move to a position
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver
further information.
seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 mm and
67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return
to its previously set position when you place the
ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Release Lever
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
141
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel light operation.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or 2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center AUTO position.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the headlights to the high beam position.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
at or above 25 mph (40 km/h).
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the To Deactivate
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to SmartBeam™ system.
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
To Activate
headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
to the on position.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
or camera lens will cause the system to function of placing the ignition in OFF position to activate this
feature.
improperly.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the
ON position, the headlights are off, and the parking
brake is released. The headlight switch must be used for
If you turn on the headlights or parking lights, or place
normal nighttime driving.
the ignition to ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
Lights-On Reminder
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
turn off in the normal manner.
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
Fog Lights
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
lights, either press headlight switch again or turn off the
headlight switch.
3
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Multifunction Lever
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
EVIC and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the multifunction lever is released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
Lane Change Assist
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control
Overhead Console
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if so
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets and
cupholders.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
position.
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, EVIC, and radio when the parking lights or
headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
Rotate
the
end of the multifunction lever to the first
the RUN position. The multifunction lever is
detent
past
the
intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
located on the left side of the steering column.
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay interval. There are
six delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a
maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
149
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering
column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle
to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The
wipers will continue to operate until you release the
multifunction lever.
Headlights On with Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the six
intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive.
Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions. Choose
setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity. Choose
setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity. The rain sense
wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the
amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield.
Place the multifunction lever in the off position when not
using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
NOTE:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
when ice or dried salt water is present on the windvehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
shield.
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
may reduce rain sensor performance.
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
• The Rain Sensing feature can be enabled or disabled.
position, the transmission shift lever is in the NEURefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is
for further information.
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the
driver’s seat cushion side shield.
3
Adjustable Pedals Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is on.
One of the following messages will display in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if a pedal
adjustment is attempted when the system is locked
out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse.”
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the rightSpeed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
side of the steering wheel, operates the system.
vehicle set speed.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button, located on the end
of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The indicator light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate and the cluster
will display a “Cruise ON” message to show that the
speed control system is on. To turn the system off, push
and release the ON/OFF button again. The system,
indicator light and message will turn off.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
• The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a
different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the
compact spare tire.
To Deactivate
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the memory if you:
• Softly tap the brake pedal.
• Press the brake pedal.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the • Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you
(CANCEL).
lever downward to SET DECEL and release, the cluster
will display the “Cruise Set” message. Remove your foot
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the
from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at
ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory.
the selected speed.
NOTE:
• Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,
or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if
equipped).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME
ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
increase. Each time the lever is tapped speed increases, so
tapping the lever three times will increase speed by
3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
157
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,
push down and hold the lever in SET DECEL. If the lever
is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the set
speed will continue to until the lever is released. Release
the lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new
set speed will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The automatic transmission will downshift while climb- PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST
ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system is a driver aid
that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle. Refer to
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions for limitations of
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
this system and recommendations.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
ParkSense威 is active when the driver shifts the transmisControl.
sion into the REVERSE position, and the parking brake is
WARNING!
not applied, and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph
(16 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve- ParkSense威 can be turned on or off through the Electronic
hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in
could lose control. An accident could be the result. PARK. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Feaor on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense威 uses four sensors located in the rear bumper
to scan for obstacles up to 79 in (200 cm) away from the
rear bumper fascia. The ParkSense威 Warning Display
located above the rear window provides both visible and
audible warnings to indicate the range of the object.
159
The Warning Display contains two sets of yellow and red
indicators, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left
rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles
behind the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view
the indicators either through the rearview mirror or by
looking at the display above the rear window.
ParkSense威 dimly illuminates the two inner most yellow
indicators when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
ParkSense威 LED Display
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY INDICATOR
Inner LED
1st LED
2nd LED
3rd LED
4th LED
5th LED
6th LED
7th LED
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
79 in (200 cm)
51.2 in (130 cm)
45.3 in (115 cm)
31.5 in (80 cm)
39.3 in (100 cm)
25.5 in (65 cm)
33.5 in (85 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
27.6 in (70 cm)
16 in (40 cm)
19.7 in (50 cm)
6 in (15 cm)
11.8 in (30 cm)
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 Rear Park
Assist system operating properly.
INDICATOR
COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Red
Yes, Half Second
No
No
No
No
No
Yes, Intermittent
Yes, Continuous
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the ParkSense威 Rear Park
Assist system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
obstruction, see your authorized dealer for service.
will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
key.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
Failure to do so can result in ParkSense威 not working
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mesobstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
• Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
sounding a tone.
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
• If a ParkSense威 system malfunction occurs, a single
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” and the
the instrument cluster.
LED in the ParkSense威 switch will illuminate. If this
occurs after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is
3
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system to be able to
stop in time when the obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense威.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the ParkSense威 sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
163
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) buttons and power sunroof switch
may also be included, if equipped.
3
Overhead Console
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
Push on the raised bar to close.
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handto turn off the light.
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
transmitter is pressed, when the Passive Entry door battery.
handle is used (refer to “Passive Entry” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa- The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
tion) or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink威 channels.
past the second detent.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
165
WARNING!
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets, or
other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–
3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink姞
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING 3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes- HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld transHomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate mitter buttons.
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
while training.
handheld transmitter.
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section. NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
button. The name and color of the button may vary by Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
manufacturer.
transmission – which may not be long enough for
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
activates, programming is complete.
door or gate motor.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
169
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC 1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
“CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
at this time.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with ProgramThen proceed with Step 4 under “Programming ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Security
Using HomeLink姞
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
To operate, press and release the programmed in your vehicle.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indietc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
vidual channels cannot be erased.
used at any time.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
3
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
are some of the most common solutions:
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
complete the training for rolling code.
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
to plug it back in?
device.
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration numplease call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifiwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
cations were met.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Controls
171
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or the ignition in the ACC or
RUN position, when using Keyless Go™). Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the power sunroof switch rearward and release,
and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the power sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the power sunroof switch forward and release, and
the sunroof will close automatically from any position.
The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This
is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the power sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the power sunroof switch
forward and release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the power sunroof switch forward and hold for two
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
to move towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the power
sunroof switch is pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button in the center of the
power sunroof switch, and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, which operPinch Protect Feature
ates regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
operation, any movement of the power sunroof switch
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obwill stop the sunroof.
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
173
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
open.
60 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posiWind Buffeting
tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underwindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Sunroof Fully Closed
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear Press the power sunroof switch forward and release to
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the ensure that the sunroof is fully closed.
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
3
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets power available only when the ignition is placed in the
on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by ACC or RUN position.
a fuse.
Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
NOTE:
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
175
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicle’s not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
3
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Center Console Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
177
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
Front Seat Cupholders
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
center console.
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows.
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Console Features
The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins
with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles
not equipped with navigation radio, the console also
contains an extra storage bin located below the climate
control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases.
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the armrest.
1 — Release button for bottom compartment
2 — Release button for top compartment
3 — Top Compartment
4 — Bottom Compartment. (You can access this compartment
directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by operating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the
armrest down.)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder
(designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and
right side of the top compartment provides clearance for
power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the
lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop’s,
cellular phones or other electrical equipment. The console’s front opening lid allows for easy access to these
compartments.
Cargo Area
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
179
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
3
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A reversible trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo
area. The rubber side of the mat is used to protect the
interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris. It
provides a nonskid surface to keep cargo from sliding.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
181
CAUTION! (Continued)
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
(Continued)
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Keyless Go Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Instrument Cluster
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)
– If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 189
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 199
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 206
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Performance Pages — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Uconnect™ GPS — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ System Warnings (Customer Information
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Operating Instructions —
Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 222
▫ Clock Setting Procedure —
RER/REN Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 226
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 226
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 234
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 235
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 246
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 246
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)
— If Equipped (REN/RER/RES Radios Only) . . 252
185
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS)
– If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Kicker威 Mobile Surround (KMS1)威
– If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 263
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
187
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Hazard Switch
— Analog Clock
— Electronic Stability Program Off Button*
— Glove Compartment
7 — Radio
8 — Climate Control
9 — Heated Seat Switch*
10 — Power Outlet
11 — Ash Tray*
12 — Storage Compartment*
13 — Ignition Switch
14 — Hood Release
15 — Trunk Release Button
16 — Headlight Switch
* If Equipped
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
189
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
1. Electronic Speed Control / Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
speed control or Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) is ON.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Low Fuel Indicator Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will 6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
sound when the fuel level drops to approximately Display / Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
1/8 tank.
been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon
3. Front Fog Light Indicator
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
lights are on.
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
when the turn signal lever is operated.
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
7. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions area.
exist. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
8. Engine Temperature Warning Light
(EVIC)” for further information).
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned OFF
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
immediately and serviced as soon as possible.
“Check Gascap” message will display in the odometer
display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and 9. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
switch is placed in the RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch placed in the RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
191
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in accident.
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light
The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indi11. Airbag Warning Light
cator Light will turn on when the key in the
This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
ignition switch placed in the RUN position.
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
The light should go out with the engine running. If the
placed in the RUN position. If the light is either
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
not on during starting, or stays on, or turns on
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
while driving, then have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
193
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleraDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approxi- 14. Temperature Gauge
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperathe parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
by an authorized dealer.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaThe light also will turn on when the parking brake is ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
applied with the ignition switch in the RUN position.
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately, and call for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
15. Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
195
19. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
16. High Beam Light
This light will turn on when the high beam
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
headlights are ON. Push the multifunction lever
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
until the vehicle is disarmed.
high beam.
17. Shift Lever Indicator
20. Fuel Gauge
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position.
automatic transmission.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
when the ignition switch is placed in the RUN
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
position. This light will also turn on while the
placed in the RUN position. A chime will sound if
engine is running if there is a problem with the
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash, or remain on
continuously, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
after the bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition
through the ACC and RUN positions. The light should
Vehicle” for further information.
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
197
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operailluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using requent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 23. Charging System Light
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
This light shows the status of the electrical chargtires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
ing system. The light should come on when the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS ignition switch is first placed in the RUN position and
to continue to function properly.
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed
(if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it
means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
24. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
the ignition is in the RUN position before engine start. If
the MIL does not come on when turning the key from
OFF to RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
25. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. A
single chime will sound when this light turns on.
199
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure
shown in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• Uconnect™ Phone displays (if equipped)
• Uconnect™ gps screens (if equipped)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Audio mode display
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
• Surround Sound modes (if equipped with Drivervariety of useful information by pressing the switches
Selectable Surround [DSS])
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• Performance Pages (if equipped)
• System status
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
201
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Performance Pages (if equipped),
Uconnect™ gps (if equipped), System Status
Messages, and Personal Settings (CustomerPress and release the MENU button and the SCROLL
Programmable Features). The SCROLL button
mode displayed will change between Trip Button
also functions as a remote sound system conFunctions, Performance Pages (if equipped),
trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.
MENU Uconnect™ gps (if equipped), System WarnPress the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Button ings, System Status, and Personal Settings.
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
compass reading and outside temperature, this
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
AUDIO screen will display radio and media mode
also functions as a remote sound system con- MODE information depending on which radio is in the
FUNCTION trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.
Button vehicle. Refer to “Remote Sound System
SELECT
Button
Controls”.
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In PARK (with
Displays
a single chime)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
• Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
the following messages:
single chime)
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
either turn signal on)
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
chime)
motion)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
• Oil Pressure
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
• Oil Change Required (with single chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
203
• ACC Off — When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • Distance Set — After changing the desired following
system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Condistance in the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system,
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
this message will display momentarily. Refer to
Vehicle” (if equipped).
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system is activated. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise • Attention — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system predicts that its maximum braking level is not
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
sufficient to maintain the set distance, this message
will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the
to apply its maximum braking capacity. When this
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system. Refer to
occurs, you should immediately apply the brakes as
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
ahead. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
• Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise
equipped).
Control (ACC) system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ACC Blinded — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In REVERSE
system deactivates due to performance limiting con(with a single chime) — only available on vehicles
ditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
equipped with memory seats.
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
• Channel # Transmit
equipped).
• Channel # Training
• ACC Unavailable — If the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system turns off due to a temporary malfunc- • Channel # Trained
tion that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive
• Clearing Channels
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea• Channels Cleared
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Service ACC — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • Did Not Train
system turns off due to an internal system fault that
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
with memory seats.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
205
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer • 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) (if equipped with Performance
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Pages)
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
• Braking Distance (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
• 1/8 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
• 1/4 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)
• Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure • Instantaneous G-Force (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting • Peak G-Force (if equipped with Performance Pages)
And Operating”)
• Digital Speedometer (if equipped with Performance
• Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
Pages)
• Turn To Run (refer to “Remote Starting System” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”)
• Upshift
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
• Display Units of Measure in
start the engine).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
207
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
Computer functions.
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informaWhen the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
tion.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
• Average Fuel Economy
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the • Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
reset.
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with • Trip B
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous reset.
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Elapsed Time
Performance Pages — If Equipped
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
WARNING!
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perforor START position.
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
• Display Units of Measure in
use only and should not be done on any public
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC- roadways. It is recommended that these features be
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” used in a controlled environment and within the
appears.
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
To Reset The Display
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
button once to clear the resettable function being disprevent accidents.
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
The Performance Pages include the following features:
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second • 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
window).
• Braking Distance
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• 1/8 Mile
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
209
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION
SELECT button is pressed.
To access, press and release the MENU button until
Performance Pages displays in the EVIC. Press the • Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run time and display the vehicle’s best
SCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press the
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time.
FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
• To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
10 seconds.
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• This feature will only function when applying the 1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/
• The word “READY” will flash when conditions are 4 mile).
met for the event to begin.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
• The distance and speed measurements display while
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condithe event is taking place.
tions are met for the event to begin.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.
plete stop.
• The time and speed will continue to display until the
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to
FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.
display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
pressed.
current run and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
(1/4 mile) run.
current run and prepare the cluster to record a new
run.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
211
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run, • Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
peak force values.
five seconds.
Digital Speedometer
Instantaneous G-Force
When selected, this screen displays vehicle speed and
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force records top speed.
(longitudinal and lateral) along with a friction circle that
• Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
displays the directions of the forces.
three seconds to toggle between current speed and top
Peak G-Force
speed.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-force
• To reset top speed, quickly press and release the
values (two longitudinal and two lateral).
FUNCTION SELECT button when top speed is
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
displayed.
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Keyless Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Go icon
momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the
new ignition switch position.
The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
Refer to “Keyless Go” in “Starting And Operating” for
more information.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
always re-appears.
Keyless Go Display
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.
• Stereo
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Video Surround
• Audio Surround
213
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the turns off. The compass will now function normally.
HOME button to display one of eight compass Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
HOME readings and the outside temperature.
Button
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
two seconds.
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes. The
Video Surround Mode will only be available for video
media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media
supported by the radio).
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lapdisplays in the EVIC.
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
215
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
two seconds.
display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
message and the last variance zone number displays in
Turn-by-Turn Directions
the EVIC.
The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a pro4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
grammed destination when Turn-by-Turn Navigation is
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
map.
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
5. Press and release the HOME button to exit.
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
Uconnect™ gps — If Equipped
indicate the distance to the turn.
Uconnect™ gps Display Control
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
detailed operating instructions.
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the
SCROLL button to display anyone of the following
choices.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
“Language”
When in this display, you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
• Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE).
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ language selection. Refer to the Uconnect™ User Manual
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
located on the DVD for further details.
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)”
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
217
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry
and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st
Press, all doors will unlock no matter which handle is
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only result in the driver’s door opening. You have to
“Remote Key Unlock”
touch a passenger handle to unlock all doors passively
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
when Driver’s Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver “Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock” — If
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE Equipped
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen- When ON is selected, you can use your RKE transmitter
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each memory profile contains desired position settings
for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if
equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
When OFF is selected, only the memory switch on the
driver’s door panel will recall memory profiles. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
“Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle”.
“Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers”
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the
standard intermittent wiper operation.
“Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit” — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” apmay be selected with or without the flash lights on pears.
lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
“OFF” appears.
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
219
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the “Delay Turning Headlights Off”
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE- when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Headlights On with Wipers”
When ON is selected, and the HEADLIGHT switch is in “Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse”
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned position and the transmission is in the REVERSE posioff if they were turned on by this feature. To make your tion. The mirrors will move back to their previous
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
Uconnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
When this feature is selected, the power WINDOW
switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.
“Park Assist System”
When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the
REVERSE or NEUTRAL position. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Turn-by-Turn Navigation” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
221
“Display Units of Measure in”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
“Automatic High Beams” — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
“SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
4
Analog Clock
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD To Manually Set the Clock
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). 1. Turn on the radio.
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
setting menu will appear on the screen.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is disRefer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understand- the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
223
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the Show Time if Radio is Off
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
downward is displayed.
as follows to change the current setting:
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
1. Turn on the radio.
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
current setting:
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
1. Turn on the radio.
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
Changing the Time Zone
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in 1. Turn on the radio.
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are disclock setting menu will appear on the screen.
played to change the current setting.
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
1. Turn on the radio.
the screen.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downUconnect威 gps — RER Only
ward is displayed.
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
downward is displayed.
daylight savings information is set.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
225
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where 1. Turn on the radio.
the word “Save” is displayed.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
current setting:
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
1. Turn on the radio.
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Changing the Time Zone
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
1. Turn on the radio.
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis- 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
played to change the current setting.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
Show Time if Radio is Off
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
RES Radio
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Operating
Instructions
— Radio Mode
side of the radio faceplate.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency.
time to turn off the radio.
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the SCROLL control knob.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
229
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
231
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranbutton will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in domly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threemally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
character extension)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
233
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). VBR bit rate.
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
MPEG SpecifiSampling FreBit Rate (kbps)
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
cation
quency (kHz)
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times.
MPEG-1 Audio
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
Layer
3
112,
96, 80, 64,
Supported MP3 File Formats
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten160, 128, 144,
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
MPEG-2
Audio
112,
96, 80, 64,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
Layer 3
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
16, 8
not play the file.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the supported by the radios.
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
235
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
side of the radio faceplate.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES/RSC Radio
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
237
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
16-Digit Character DisProgram Type
play
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No
program
type
or
unand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
None
defined
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
the front and rear speakers.
Classical
Classicl
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
16-Digit Character Display
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
239
16-Digit Character Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
the following items:
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
to save time change.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
AM/FM Button
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
button number will display.
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
241
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
MP3 Audio Play
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
243
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanThe radio uses the following limits for file systems:
dom Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of files: 255
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeextension may cause playback problems. The radio is
character extension)
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- not play the file.
character extension)
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
245
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
247
radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ,
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is available only if
time of day will display for five seconds (when the equipped as an option with these radios.
ignition is OFF).
This feature allows an iPod威 to be plugged into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
the provided interface cable.
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
Features If Your Vehicle”.
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
website for software updates.
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
NOTE:
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 — • If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
IF EQUIPPED
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
compartment on some vehicles).
REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code
RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the • If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
not communicate with the UCI system until a minifeature to control the connected device.
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to Using This Feature
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in By using the provided connection cable to connect an
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
etc.) information on the radio display.
radio switches, as described below.
• The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
NOTE:
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
• It may be necessary to remove the connector pin
protection cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to • The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connecting the cable.
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically •
starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display •
data:
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
•
previous track.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
•
the beginning of the current track.
249
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list; pressing this
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
beginning of the track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the
list.
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
iPod威.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
mode to repeat the current playing track.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwill play the first five seconds of each track in the
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
the radio display may be noticed.
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
251
• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE control knob. This will display the next submenu list item on the iPod威 then follow the same steps
to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
253
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when faceplate.
calling:
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Number (ESN/SID).
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
mode.
ESN/SID Access With RES Radios
Satellite Antenna
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posiTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
255
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
RW/FF
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
following items:
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
twice.
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Sirius subscription.
button number will display.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to Buttons 1 - 6
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
and press and release that button. If a button is not
Equipped)
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butRefer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –
IF EQUIPPED
257
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. The “Video Surround” mode is
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio described unde rDriver-Selectable Surround (DSS). The
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from Video Surround Mode will only be available for video
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media
supported by the radio). Some audio will sound better in
DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available to add more surround audio if desired.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ includes the following components for rear seat entertainment:
Opening the Rear Seat VES™
• A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) • The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest
screen integrated into the center console armrest. The
to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.
screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
259
• A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into
a molded compartment in the center console armrest
upper storage bin.
4
VES™ Video Screen
NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been
raised to its viewing position.
VES™ Remote Control
• The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow
front seat operation for easy setup in the case of • Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passengers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
younger rear seat passengers.
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
Kicker姞 Mobile Surround (KMS1)姞 – If Equipped
The VES™ for this vehicle comes equipped with Kicker
Mobile Surround (KMS1).威 This feature offers the ultimate movie experience by providing surround sound
uniquely equalized for the interior space of your vehicle.
The KMS1威 Video Surround mode activates whenever a
video source is selected, unless the system is already in
“Audio Surround” mode. DSS modes for video sources
are “Stereo,” “Audio Surround,” and “Video Surround.”
When in Video Surround mode, balance and fade are set
automatically by the KMS1威 system to provide the
ultimate surround sound experience.
NOTE: Refer to your “Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)™ Users Manual” for detailed operating instruc- REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
tions.
EQUIPPED
NOTE: Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of The remote sound system controls are located on the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
261
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
VOLUME Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
Button decrease the sound level.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio and media mode information
AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
MODE
Button
Remote Sound System Controls
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information mode will change (i.e. from AM to FM, to Media mode,
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to operate various radio, media, and
FUNCTION Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions
SELECT
(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to
Button
or start playing songs in playlists, etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with
UCI).
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
SCROLL files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
Button vehicle.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
263
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- Automatic Temperature Control
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
Automatic Temperature Controls
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
Automatic Operation
The Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the mode control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
the blower control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver
or passenger temperature control knob. Once the comfort
level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic operation.
Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing the air conditioning control button while
in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the
control button to flash three times and then turn off. This
indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the recirculation control button will temporarily put the system in
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
Recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,
or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will
completely and closes the outside air intake.
cause the indicator in the control button to illuminate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
265
After 10 minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
mode function and the indicator will turn off.
features, which consist of blower preferred automatic,
NOTE:
mode preferred automatic, or blower and mode preferred
• The surface of the climate control panel and the top
automatic. This means the operator can override the
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
debris due to the location of the climate control
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
operation of this system.
rotating the blower control knob (on the left).
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
NOTE:
to fog. If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
• For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate
the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some
controls will not function during Remote Start operatemp/humidity conditions will cause captured intetion if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility.
position.
For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode. • Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these
modes will cause the indicator in the control button to
blink and then turn off.
4
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
267
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Bi-Level
change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control
Air flows through the outlets located in the instruknob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
ment panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
• Defrost
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
Air is directed to the windshield through the
can be closed to block airflow.
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side • Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instruwindow demister grilles.
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
• Defrost/Floor
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the • Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
side window demister grilles.
during manual operation only. When the air con• Floor
ditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
flow through the outlets selected with the mode control
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
dial. Press this button a second time to turn off the air
through vents under the front seats.
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
conditioning. An indicator in the button illuminates Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and
when manual compressor operation is selected.
then turn off.
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position. Operating Tips
• Recirculation Control
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The Recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. An indicator in the button
illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active. You
may use this feature separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
269
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months long periods, as fogging may occur.
is not recommended because it may cause window
Outside Air Intake
fogging.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
Vacation Storage
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure slush, and snow.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again. A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The climate control system filters outside air containing
Window Fogging
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
moved by turning the mode selector to defrost. The Section 7 for filter replacement instructions.
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
4
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Keyless Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 283
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 285
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 280
䡵 AutoStick威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 302
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 313
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tires — General Information
273
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 326
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 319 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ 6.1L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 334
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Tire Rotation – Standard Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Tire Rotation – All Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . 325 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 340
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
275
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
before shifting into any driving gear.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
Installing and Removing the ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing the Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing the Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
STARTING AND OPERATING
277
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK START/STOP Button
position (OFF position for Keyless Go™).
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Normal Starting
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
accelerator pedal.
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressbutton is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
PARK position, or it could roll.
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
Keyless Go™ Functions – With Driver’s Foot OFF
the Brake Pedal Pedal (In PARK or NEUTRAL
Position)
The Keyless Go™ feature operates similar to an ignition
switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps.
• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
279
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
281
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon:
• Altitude
• Vehicle loading
• Driving style
• Shift lever position
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before
the shift lock will release.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position
with Keyless Go™) before restarting. Transmission
engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after
restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK
position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) first.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
• The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob
from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once
the key fob is removed from the ignition, the shift
lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,
you should never leave unattended children inside a
vehicle.
283
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal
operation.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and
once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the
Over-Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds position (OFF position with Keyless Go™). To move the
normal operating temperature, the transmission will shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
must be turned to the ON or START position (engine is
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
the override, remove the rubber tray from the storage bin
located to the right of the shift lever. The override access
port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever
gate.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position
Interlock Manual Override
(RUN position with Keyless Go™) without starting the
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 7. Reinstall the override cover.
4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab
through the access port on the center console.
STARTING AND OPERATING
285
With Keyless Go™
If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to
turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/
STOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or RUN
position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the instructions shown above to activate the override.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
5
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the • When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking • Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
CAUTION!
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
Damage to the shift lever could result if the shift
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition
uphill grade.
switch is turned from the LOCK (OFF position with
Keyless Go™) to the ON position (RUN position
WARNING!
with Keyless Go™).
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully REVERSE
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
possible injury or damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
287
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the AutoStick威 mode and select the “3”
range.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- 1. Stop the vehicle.
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
achieve maximum efficiency.
3. Turn the engine off.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
5. Restart the engine.
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no 6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission return to normal operation.
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recombrought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Secearliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The “Maldiagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
function Indicator Light (MIL)” may be illuminated.
recur.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the
as soon as possible.
transmission, use the following procedure:
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can NOTE:
• In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will shift up and
be reset to regain all forward gears.
down when the driver manually moves the shift lever
AUTOSTICK姞
right (D+) or left (D-).
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of • An “UPSHIFT” message will appear in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the inthe vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine
strument cluster when using AutoStick威. This message
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
next gear. The “UPSHIFT”message will display while
can also provide you with more control during passing,
operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
minute (RPM).
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can be
moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select
a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever to
the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an
upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument
cluster on the transmission range indicator.
You can shift in or out of the AutoStick威 mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When you wish to engage AutoStick威, simply move the
shift lever to the right (D+) or left (D-) while in the DRIVE
position. The transmission will remain in the current gear
until an upshift or downshift is chosen. When you wish
to disengage AutoStick威, hold the shift lever to the right
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
for at least one second. The transmission will now • Transmission shifting will be more crisp/abrupt when
operate automatically, shifting between the five available
AutoStick威 is engaged.
gears.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
General Information
Acceleration
• You can start out in first or second gear. The system Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipwill ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratispeed.
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
gear when coming to a stop.
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is engaged.
• The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is
engaged.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
291
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
293
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
295
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
5
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
Parking Brake
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
297
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
short time after the stop),
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • Brake pedal pulsations, and
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
related motor noises. These noises are the system perof the stop.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING
299
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
(Continued)
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon
as possible.
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Light” monitors the antilock brake system. The light will come on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are
not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is
required.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the
Traction Control System (TCS), the Brake Assist System
(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Light” is on, the brake system and control in various driving conditions.
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
301
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
STARTING AND OPERATING
303
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
maintain the desired path.
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
conditions.
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
WARNING!
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resultappropriate for the steering wheel position.
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atappropriate for the steering wheel position.
tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
others.
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESP ON again, momentarily press the
ESP On
“ESP OFF” switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
will turn off.
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
as noted in the following paragraphs.
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESP
Partial Off
OFF” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momenmore spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
tarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
while the vehicle is in motion.
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more Full Off
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
The “ESP OFF” switch is located in the switch bank near
this mode, all TCS and ESP stability features are turned
the top center of the instrument panel. To enter the
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESP OFF”
“ESP OFF” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
The ESP system has three available operating modes:
STARTING AND OPERATING
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESP OFF⬙ message will display in the
vehicle odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear
this message. The “ESP OFF” message may appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESP ON again, momentarily press the “ESP
OFF” switch.
NOTE: The ⬙ESP OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.
305
WARNING!
In the ESP “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: When the ESP is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESP OFF” switch.
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
With the ESP switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESP mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
Synchronizing ESP
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If
this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to
the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction
Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. They should go out with the engine
running.
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” on continuously while the engine is running if
it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING
307
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
• The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Tire Markings
Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
• Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the ESP System will be ON even if it was
turned OFF previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
5
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designamolded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING
309
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
311
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
313
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuInformation placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
of this manual.
on your vehicle’s placard.
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
STARTING AND OPERATING
315
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
(392 kg).
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
317
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
319
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
temperature changes.
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
WARNING!
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
WARNING!
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle under maxiways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
75 mph (120 km/h).
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
STARTING AND OPERATING
321
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 — Worn Tire
to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 — New Tire
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors including, but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
• Distance driven
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
You could lose control and have an accident resulting that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
in serious injury or death.
specifications or capability.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING
323
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
smooth, quiet ride.
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is
(120 km/h).
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
unusual wear should be corrected prior to performing
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at the tire rotation.
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
325
Tire Rotation – Standard Tires
Tire Rotation – All Season Tires
The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
shown in the following diagram.
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
the following diagram.
5
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
327
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
the tire.
or condition.
Premium System
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure.
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the receiver module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
stopping ability.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
• Receiver module,
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light. • Four TPM sensors,
STARTING AND OPERATING
329
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
• TPM Telltale Light.
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values flashing.
5
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
STARTING AND OPERATING
331
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
the TPM sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains 15 mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,
materials that may block radio wave signals.
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
flashing pressure value.
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the
5
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for following conditions:
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
pressure value.
operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the ing licenses:
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.1L Engine
333
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
The 6.1L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
Reformulated Gasoline
higher.
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spehigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imrequired. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
prove air quality.
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will probefore considering service for the vehicle.
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E85 perform the following:
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
STARTING AND OPERATING
335
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
engine controller memory
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
exposure to E85 fuel.
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
Materials Added to Fuel
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
fuel.
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
337
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate/trunk closed when driving your
vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other
poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If so equipped, use the finger pull
to open the door. Otherwise, push in on the left side (near
(Continued)
the edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
5
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
339
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Type of Vehicle
indicated.
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the rear of the driver’s door.
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
The label contains the following information:
GVWR.
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
341
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
5
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
tire pressure.
WARNING!
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installaTRAILER TOWING
tion. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
and reinstallation procedures, including flange
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,
is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
proper bolt torque specifications, etc.
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
transmission damage.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 TIREFIT Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Without The Ignition Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 346
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6
344
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the may wear down your battery.
center of the instrument panel between the center air
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
outlets.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflasher. When the switch is activated, all directional tion.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to • On the highways — slow down.
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
345
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C Small punctures up to 1⁄4” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control -4°F (-20°C).
6
346
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you TIREFIT Kit Components and Operation
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr).
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button — If Equipped
3. Pressure Gauge
TIREFIT Location
4. Power Button
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear with Yellow Cap)
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
8. Power Plug
347
Selecting Sealant Mode
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (clear hose with the yellow cap)
(6) when selecting this mode.
Using the Mode Select Knob and Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit may be equipped with either of the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Using the Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
Selecting Air Mode
turn ON the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this
Power Button (4) again to turn OFF the TIREposition for air pump operation only.
FIT kit.
Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7)
when selecting this mode.
Using the Deflation Button — If Equipped
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
6
348
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) is a one tire
application use. After each use, always immediately
replace these components at an authorized dealer.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (located on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or like inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant
is only intended to seal punctures less than 1⁄4” (6mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry TIREFIT kit by hoses.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
WARNING!
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
discarded.
vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
to avoid the danger of being hit when using the
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
TIREFIT kit.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
349
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
− If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approximately 0.24 in. (6 mm) or larger.
− If the tire has any sidewall damage.
− If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
− If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
− If the wheel has any damage.
− If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6
350
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
• Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (located on the bottom of the air
pump) when operating the TIREFIT kit.
Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the
valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground.
This will provide the best positioning of the kit when
injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the
valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn OFF the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up to Use TIREFIT:
1. Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Compartment (located on the bottom of the air pump) and
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn ON the vehicle’s place them on your hands.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode
position.
(A) Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
351
3. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shifter in NEUTRAL.
yellow cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
4. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the • After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
deflated tire.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
5. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
valve stem.
6. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and then insert the plug into If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn OFF the TIREFIT
kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
nails) from the tire.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant into the deflated
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
tire:
Select Knob (5) is in the sealant mode position and not air
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE- mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn ON the TIREFIT
FIT kit.
kit.
6
352
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
the TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch
pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure
by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on air mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump pressure within 15 minutes:
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation
1. Continue to operate pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As
the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar). The
Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
Button and the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire”.
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant
contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s
interior. It can also result in sealant contacting
internal TIREFIT kit components which may
cause permanent damage to the kit.
353
(D) Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire:
Immediately after injecting sealant, and inflating tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until
having the tire repaired or replaced. Failure to follow
this warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire:
Follow Step (A) “Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT”
before continuing.
6
354
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
position.
recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) and connect it to the 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and
valve stem.
then reinstall the cap on the valve stem.
3. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire serfurther. Call for assistance.
vice center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to on and inflate the tire to
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
NOTE: If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation
using the TIREFIT service kit.
Button and the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6).
355
housing. Then, press the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard, indicating the bottle is locked
in place.
2. Locate the rectangular Sealant Bottle release button in
6. Verify the yellow cap is installed on the fitting at the
the recessed area where you place your fingers to unlatch
end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
the hoses (6) (7) from their storage area.
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
3. Use the yellow cap on end of the Sealant Hose (6) to
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
depress the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
vehicle.
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of
it accordingly.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
ing.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) to the housing so pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
front of the housing and the alignment keys on the
bottom of the bottle align with the alignment slots in the NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
6
356
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
1 — Remote Negative (-) Post
2 — Remote Positive (+) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Remote Battery Posts
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
357
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
6
358
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
charged battery.
the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
359
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REvehicle.
VERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinyou should have the battery and charging system in- ning the wheels, is most effective.
spected at your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
CAUTION!
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for further
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, information.
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
360
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground unless the
rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL.
Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL under the following conditions:
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
361
Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the
ground (or the rear driveshaft removed) with no limitation on speed or distance.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km)
or faster than 30 mph (48 kph), then the only
approved method of towing is with a flatbed
truck. Otherwise, damage to the transmission may
result.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
(Continued)
6
362
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be placed in the
RUN position, not the ACC position. Make certain the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 366
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
7
364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 400
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, And
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 413
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
365
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.1L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Integrated Power Module
Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
366
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will appear in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
367
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replaceproblem continues, the message will appear the next time ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
may also turn on the MIL.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
do the following:
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- this test over.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II a normal bulb check.
system is ready for testing.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II happen:
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
7
368
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
369
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil maintenance schedule, there are other components which
penalties being assessed against you.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
(Continued)
7
370
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 l) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must Change Engine Oil
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
371
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, SAE 5W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating
temperatures.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725
and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5 (will be listed
on the back label of the oil container).
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomThe manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
5W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
are followed.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
7
372
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
WARNING!
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
your area.
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
Engine Oil Filter
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter near the engine compartment before starting the
at every engine oil change.
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
Engine Oil Filter Selection
serious personal injury.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
373
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
Battery Location
7
374
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
375
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
376
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- the retaining clips.
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
Access Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
377
2. Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down
and remove the used filter.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte3. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the nance intervals.
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
Body Lubrication
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
7
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
379
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
system.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
7
380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
381
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
motion.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
7
382
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
383
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
384
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
Adding Coolant
anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionintervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintewill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine cooling system.
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainvehicle.
tain the proper level of protection against freezing acPlease review these recommendations for using Hybrid cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant the vehicle is operated.
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
385
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
7
386
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
387
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
freezing.
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
emissions.
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
7
388
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately leak and a checkup may be needed.
if the brake system warning light indicates system failUse only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Reure.
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
forming underhood services.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
389
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
390
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
391
Fluid and Filter Changes
Special Additives
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by suppleIf the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addifluid and filter should be changed.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
Selection of Lubricant
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor- they may adversely affect seals.
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmisCAUTION!
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaDo not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be mainthe chemicals can damage your transmission compotained at the prescribed level using the recommended
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transVehicle Limited Warranty.
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
Rear Axle
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
7
392
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condiFluid Level Check
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
underbody protection.
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. The following maintenance recommendations will enable
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Fluid
What Causes Corrosion?
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- • Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
• Stone and gravel impact.
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
393
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
7
394
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
and open.
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
considered the responsibility of the owner.
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as posnon-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respona bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
sibility of the owner.
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
packaged and sealed.
finish.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
395
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner or equivalent
ner:
for carpeting.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
with a clean, dry towel.
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomsoap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
mended for leather upholstery.
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
soap residue.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
protectants on Stain Repel products.
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
7
396
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
WARNING!
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and scratch the elements.
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
397
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol buckles do not work properly.
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders
with a clean damp rag.
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
7
398
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
CAUTION!
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Integrated Power Module
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
Cartridge
Fuse
—
2
—
3
—
4
—
5
6
—
—
7
8
—
—
9
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
—
25 Amp
Natural
—
30 Amp
Green
—
Washer Motor
10
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Ignition Run/Start
11
Alternator
13
—
Ignition Coils/Injectors
14
15
—
Starter
16
17
18
19
—
12
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
—
50 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
399
MiniFuse
Description
—
Windshield Wiper
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor
—
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7
400
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
20
21
22
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
—
—
—
—
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Opening the Access Panel
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
401
CAUTION!
Rear Power Distribution Center
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
7
402
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
4
CarMinitridge
Fuse
Fuse
60 Amp —
Yellow
40 Amp —
Green
—
—
40 Amp —
Green
Description
Cavity
6
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
—
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear
Power Distribution
Center contains a black
IOD fuse needed for
vehicle processing during assembly. The service replacement part is
a 60 Amp yellow cartridge fuse.
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
—
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
5
7
—
8
—
9
—
10
11 *
—
—
MiniFuse
—
Description
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
20 Amp Fuel Pump
Yellow
20 Amp Sub Amp – If Equipped
Yellow
15 Amp Diagnostic Link ConnecBlue
tor (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN)
20 Amp Power Outlet
Yellow
—
—
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
12 *
13 *
14
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
15
16
17
—
—
—
18
—
19
—
20
21
—
—
MiniFuse
—
—
10 Amp
Red
Description
—
—
AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Security Module – If Equipped
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Cluster
Yellow
20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet
Yellow
10 Amp Stop Lights
Red
—
—
—
—
Cavity
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
28
—
29
—
403
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp
Orange
—
—
—
—
—
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run
Cluster/Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/Stop
Light Switch
7
404
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
30
Cartridge
Fuse
—
31
32
33
34
35
—
—
—
—
—
36
—
37
—
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp Door Modules/Power
Red
Mirrors/Steering Control Module (SCM)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 Amp Antenna Module – If
Orange Equipped/Power Mirrors
25 Amp Hands-Free Phone – If
Natural Equipped/Video Monitor – If Equipped/Radio
15 Amp Transmission
Blue
Cavity
38
39
40
41
42
43
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp Cargo Light/Satellite
Red
Receiver (SDARS) Video
– If Equipped/Vehicle
Information Module – If
Equipped
—
10 Amp Heated Mirrors – If
Red
Equipped
—
5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview
Orange Mirror/Heated Seats – If
Equipped/Switch Bank
—
—
—
30 Amp —
Front Blower Motor
Pink
30 Amp —
Rear Window Defroster
Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
44
CarMinitridge
Fuse
Fuse
20 Amp —
Blue
Description
Amplifier – If
Equipped/Sunroof – If
Equipped
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The
passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit
breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power
window switch, and the passenger power window
switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity
13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
405
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
406
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/
Cupholder. . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge
(HID) . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side
Marker . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . . . . . . LED
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp
407
2. Remove the two fasteners from the back of the tail
lamp assembly.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: When HID headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes
more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
charges.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, and Backup
tail lamp assembly.
Lamp
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
1. Open the trunk.
7
408
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counterclockwise to
remove.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
1 — Tail/Stop Lamp Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2 — Tail Lamp Bulb
3 — Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
409
7
410
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
11. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
12. Close the trunk.
License Lamp
4 — Backup Lamp Bulb
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
411
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and 5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
install the replacement bulb.
the screws.
7
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
412
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-40, API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.1 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
19 Gallons
Metric
72 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
15.2 Quarts
14.4 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
413
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine
oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725
and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5. The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 5W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
PLZTR5A-13 (Gap 0.040 in [1.01 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher.
7
414
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W–90 (API GL-5) or equivalent
(with MOPAR威 Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive).
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 418 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 416
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
416
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serNOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emisvice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
(805 km).
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
417 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
At Each Stop for Fuel
N
C
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance E
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your VeS
hicle” for further information.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichrequired.
ever comes first.
Once a Month
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
as required.
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
418
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, add as needed.
CAUTION!
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
S • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
419 M
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
E
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
421 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
423 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
425 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.*
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
427 M
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
429 M
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
N
T 138 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
431 M
A
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer I
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions N
T
warranty.
WARNING!
Date
Dealer Code
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 436
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 436
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
9
434
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
435
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
436
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be reChrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 247–9753
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center.
Phone: (800) 465–2001
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
ter should include the following information:
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s name and address
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
437
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-4852001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
438
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
439
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, MasTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: for an order form.
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
http://www.safercar.gov.
• Service Manuals
In Canada
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
information that students and professional technicians
should contact the Customer Service Department immeneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
440
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in • Owner’s Manuals
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
and charts.
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diaand maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practicapabilities and safety tips.
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve- Call toll free at:
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures, • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
Or
and equipment.
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
441
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
442
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
444
INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,297
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,301
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 384
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 372
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,376
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,376
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,375
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,62
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,66,81,191
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,62
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 56,60,62
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,195
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,412
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,301
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,300
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 17
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 17
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
INDEX
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,30
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 263
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,390,391
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,414
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . 288
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
445
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 23
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,81
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,387
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,301
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388,414
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,297
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,387
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 78
10
446
INDEX
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,406 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70,71,74,76
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Cleaning
Caps, Filler
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222,224,227,236
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,337 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,263 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
INDEX
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 247
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 385
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,386
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 383,412,413
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
447
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,397
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,267
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
10
448
INDEX
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 258
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 155
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 195
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 199
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 367,416
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,413
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
INDEX
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,337
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,412,413
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,412
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 63
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Exhaust
Exhaust
Exterior
Exterior
Exterior
449
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,337
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,379
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,376
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,413
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,145,189
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
10
450
INDEX
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 413
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,189
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,413
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,366
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
INDEX
451
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 146
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,150
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Hazard
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 146
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 164
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,24,122,290,332
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
10
452
INDEX
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,212,276
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70 Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,189
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
INDEX
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,406
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,141
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,66,81,191
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,300
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,297
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,164
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,146
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 306
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 195
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,189
453
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,407
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,150
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,195
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,189
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,164
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 198
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,164
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . 148
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10
454
INDEX
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,164
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 198
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 196,326
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,145,189
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 189
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,341
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 198,367
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,164
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
INDEX
455
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,60,64
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,60,62
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,413
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,413
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,413
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,412
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,412
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,438
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10
456
INDEX
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,367
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,439
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 313
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 174
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,294
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 152
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
INDEX
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威 studios) .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . .
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
320
385
263
260
252
150
177
158
134
181
181
129
342
457
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 260
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
10
458
INDEX
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,44,81
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 49
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70,71,76
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,45
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
INDEX
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,195
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 383,413
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222,224,227,236
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,285
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
459
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,145,189
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,275
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
10
460
INDEX
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 263
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . 193,194,345
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 313
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,317,441
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,294
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,405
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,405
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 53
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
INDEX
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,314
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,317
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
461
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 342
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,285,390
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 164
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,42
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
10
462
INDEX
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Video Entertainment System™
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,189 (Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 247 Warning Lights
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,149,379
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,340,341 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,405 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,173
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 17 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,267
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,149,379
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . .
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INDEX
463
.
.
.
.
.
148
378
149
149
150
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
Chrysler Group LLC
10C482-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Download PDF

advertising